2007 SENTRA OWNER'S MANUAL

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-ing and avoid using vehicle features ortaking other actions that could distractyou.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Sentra (sen)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)07/03/06—tbrooks X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

© 2006 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CAREPROGRAM



Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8


1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-23)2. Rear head restraint (P. 1-5)3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag (P. 1-38)5. Supplemental side-impact air bags

(P. 1-38)6. Front head restraint (P. 1-7)7. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)8. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-38)9. Seats (P. 1-2)

10. Occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) (P.1-38)

11. Seat belt pre-tensioners (P. 1-52)12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-21)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0088

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-22)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-17)3. Windshield (P. 8-16)4. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-31)5. Power windows (P. 2-29)6. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped),

Intelligent Key system (if so equipped),keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-10, 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-27)8. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)10. Tire chains (P. 8-33)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-18)12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23)13. Fog light switch (P. 2-18)14. Tie down hook (P. 6-13)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0089

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Trunk lid (P.3-22 )2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Interior truck lid release (P. 3-23)4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18)5. Child safety locks (P. 3-6)6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-24)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-24, P. 9-3)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23)9. Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P.3-23, P. 3-16)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0090

EXTERIOR REAR



1. Rear seat (P. 1-3)2. Sunroof (P. 2-31)3. Interior lights, illuminated entry, sunroof

switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-33, P. 2-18, P. 2-31)

4. Sun visors (P. 3-26)5. Inside mirror (P. 3-27)6. Glove box (P. 2-26)7. Cupholders (P. 2-25)8. Parking brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-15, P. 5-19)9. Front seat (P. 1-2)10. Front console (P. 2-26)11. Rear armrest, cupholders

(P. 1-7, P 2-25)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0091

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-18)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio controland BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-35, 4-37)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn(P. 1-38, 2-22)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-20)6. Cruise control main/set switches (if so

equipped) (P. 5-16)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-17)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)9. Audio system (P. 4-15)10. Center ventilator (P. 4-6)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)12. Control panel display (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)13. Side ventilator (P. 4-6)14. Glove box (P. 2-26)15. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-38)16. Climate control (P. 4-7)17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)18. Power outlet (P. 2-22)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-21)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-5)21. Tilt steering (P.3-26)22. Sunglasses holder(P. 2-24)23. Hood release lever (P. 3-22)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LIC1013

INSTRUMENT PANEL



1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)3. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)4. Battery (P. 8-13)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-18)7. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)9. Drive belt location (P.8-14)10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)*1 For Manual Transmission (M/T) modelSee the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0536

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakingwarning light (if soequipped)

2-8

or

Brake warning light 2-8

Charge warning light 2-8

Door open warninglight

2-8

Electric powersteering warninglight

2-9

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-9

Intelligent Key sys-tem warning light (ifso equipped)

2-9

Warninglight

Name Page

Low fuel warninglight

2-10

Low tire pressurewarning light (if soequipped)

2-10

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight (if so equipped)

2-11

P position selectingwarning light (CVTmodels) (if soequipped)

2-11

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-11

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-11

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) position indi-cator light (CVTmodels)

2-12

CRUISE mainswitch indicator light(if so equipped)

2-12

Cruise SET switchindicator light (if soequipped)

2-12

or

Front passenger airbag status light

2-12

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-12

Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)

2-12

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

Security indicatorlight

2-13

Overdrive off indica-tor light (CVT mod-els)

2-13

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-13




MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Rear folding seat system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 1-3Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Child restraint installation using the seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjustthe seat height until the desired position isachieved.

REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM (if soequipped)

WRS0719 WRS0720 WRS0721

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


Interior trunk access (if so equipped)The trunk can be accessed from the rear seat forloading and unloading, as shown.

1. Stow outboard seatbelts with clip beforefolding rear seat backs.

When folding the passenger’s side rear seatback, first disconnect and stow the center seat-belt. See “Stowing the rear center seatbelt” laterin this section.

2. Pull up on the strap sA located on the topoutboard side of the seat to be folded.

3. Fold seat back down.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

LRS0728 WRS0726



Folding the rear cushions and seatbacks (if so equipped)

1. Lift up on the strap (on the front edge of theseat cushion) and fold cushion toward frontof vehicle.

2. Fold down the rear head restraint. Pull thehead restraint down and rotate to the lowerpositions1 .

LRS0729 LRS0730 LRS0733



3. To return the head restraint to the normalposition, push down s1 and release thenrotate up until in position s2 .

4. Fold down seat backs. See “Interior trunkaccess (if so equipped)” in this section.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.


LRS0734 LRS0731



Center armrestPull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

WIC1097 WRS0133 WRS0134



ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effec-tiveness of the active head restraint.

● Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairactive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the occu-pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of thehead restraint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement and helpingabsorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed in this section.

SPA1025



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weighbetween 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kg) can be

placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommendations.NISSAN recommends that small children beplaced in child restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle and alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

s1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual front seat shownWRS0719



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat belt and the rear three-point seat belts have a locking mechanism forchild restraint installation. It is referred to as theautomatic locking mode or child restraint mode.

When automatic locking mode is activated theseat belt cannot be extended again until the seatbelt tongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the

emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints”later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Center of the rear seatThe rear seat center seat belt has a connectortongue s1 and a seat belt tongue s2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WRS0139 SSS0240



WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt. Donot use it with only the seat belt tongueattached. This could result in seriouspersonal injury in case of an accident ora sudden stop.

Stowing the rear center seat belt

When folding down the rear seat, the center seatbelt can be retracted into a stowed position asfollows:

s1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle. Release the connector tongue byinserting a suitable tool such as key into theconnector buckle sA .

s2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

s3 Insert the seat belt connector buckle into thefabric sleeve to stow.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

SSS0241

WRS0735



● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

Attaching the rear center seat belt

Always be sure the center seat belt connectortongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-connect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

s1 Pull out the connector buckle from fabricsleeve.

s2 Pull out the connector tongue.

s3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelt” earlier in this section.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

WRS0736



● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Frontseats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition s2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

LRS0242



● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seatbelts to retract until they are completely dry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see “Child re-straint installation using the seat belts”later in this section.

● Improper use or improper installationof a child restraint can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH Systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred to as theLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Systemor LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigidor webbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to these lower anchors. For details,see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See“Child restraint installed using the seat belts”later in this section. In general, child restraints arealso designed to be installed with the lap portionof a lap/shoulder seat belt.



Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and small children of various sizes. Whenselecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERSFOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compat-ible child restraints. This system may also bereferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatiblesystem. With this system, you do no have to usea vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-tions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraintin the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of theseat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-tached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown inthe illustration. If a child restraint is notsecured properly, your child could beseriously injured or killed in anaccident.

LATCH system anchor locationsLRS0724

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700



● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH anchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCH anchorattachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withthe LATCH system. This information may also bein the instructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint. See “Childrestraint installation using LATCH System” in thissection.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf the manufacturer of your child restraint requiresthe use of a top tether strap, it must be secured tothe anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

Top Tether Anchor Point Locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcelshelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor LATCH System (rear outboard seat positionsonly), as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorbracket that provides the straightest instal-lation.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint on the rearseat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-tails.

LRS0723



CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Latch Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren System (LATCH)”. If a child re-straint is not secured properly, yourchild could be seriously injured or killedin an accident.

● The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-ion material. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the LATCH an-chors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seat back..

If the seating position does not have an adjust-able head restraint and it is interfering with theproper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-tion or a different child restraint.

Front facing web-mounted – step 2LRS0663



4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). Ifit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pullagain on the anchor attachments to furthertighten the child restraint. If you are unable toproperly secure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using LATCH System:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 2LRS0664

Front facing – step 4LRS0671

Front facing – step 6WRS0697



2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. 3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). Ifit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pullagain on the anchor attachments to furthertighten the child restraint. If you are unable toproperly secure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear facing web-mounted – step 2LRS0665

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 2LRS0666

Rear facing – step 3LRS0673



5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. A rear-facingchild restraint could be struck by thesupplemental front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” earlier in this sec-tion for details.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

Rear facing – step 4LRS0674 WRS0256



The instructions in this section apply to childrestraint installation using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seat or the front passenger seat.

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to install the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. If the seatingposition does not have an adjustable head re-straint and it is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-ferent child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.





5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “Toptether strap child restraint” in this section.Do not install child restraints that require theuse of a top tether strap to seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.






8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again onthe shoulder belt to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properly securethe restraint, move the restraint to anotherseating position and try again, or try a differ-ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit inall types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light or should illumi-nate. If this light is not illuminated see 9Frontpassenger air bag and status light9 in thissection. Move the child restraint to an-other seating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.

Front facing – step 11 (Type A)LRS0351

Front facing – step 11 (Type B)LRS0316



Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256

Rear facing – step 2WRS0682




4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the childrestraint; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraint tocompress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again onthe shoulder belt to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properly securethe restraint, move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.






7. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a booster seat in thefront seat, see “Booster seat installa-tion” in this section.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● Improper use or improper installationof a booster seat can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS



● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if a

LRS0455



low back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seatsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-matic locking mode when using a boosterseat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464



1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

WRS0699Rear center position

LRS0451

Rear outboard positionLRS0452



4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light or may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of thechild and the type of booster seat beingused. See “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

Front passenger positionLRS0454 LRS0351



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impact force tothe chest and pelvic area of the driver and frontpassenger in certain side impact collisions. Thefront seat side-impact supplemental side air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion the im-pact force to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certain sideimpact collisions. The curtain side-impact airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

LRS0316

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

ARS1045 WRS0256



WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag:

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact airbags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in the seat.The side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflate with great force. Do notallow anyone to place their hand, leg orface near the side air bag on the side ofthe seatback of the front seat or nearthe side roof rails. Do not allow anyonesitting in the front seats or rear out-board seats to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against the door.Some examples of dangerous ridingpositions are shown in the previousillustrations.

SSS0101 SSS0188



WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162



1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-ules

2. SRS side-impact air bags3. Supplemental front air bag modules4. Crash zone sensor5. Diagnosis sensor unit6. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)7. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor8. Side satellite sensor

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.LRS0725



They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based onthe severity of a collision and seat belt usage forthe driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will notbe illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.




Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status lightor is located near the climate controls. Thelight operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: Theor is OFF and the front passenger airbag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The or illuminates toindicate that the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-tion: The light or is OFF to in-dicate that the front passenger air bag isoperational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-

Type ALRS0722

Type BLRS0316



tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor and the belttension detected on the seat belt, the advancedair bag system determines whether the front pas-senger air bag should be automatically turnedOFF as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in anaccident or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crash insteadof being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,



until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.



● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side-impact air bag andcurtain side-impact air bags systemThe supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact airbags are located in the side roof rails. Thesesystems are designed to meet voluntary guide-lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the infor-mation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similar

to those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise maybe heard, followed by release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the impact forceto the head of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating side air bag and curtain side-impact airbag may cause abrasions or other injuries.Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to thelower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far as

LRS0259



practical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front and rear outboard occupants.Because of this, the force of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bagwill deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tions.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag or damageto the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.



Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplemental airbag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.



1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning LabelSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbag and supplemental side air bag systems areplaced in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems. The circuits monitored by the supplementalair bag warning light are the diagnosis sensorunit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front airbag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat beltsand all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems may not operate properly. It must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

LRS0695 LRS0100



WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systemsand/or pre-tensioner seat belt systemswill not operate in an accident. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain side-impact air bags andpre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflateon a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless itis damaged, the supplemental air bag warninglight remains illuminated after inflation has oc-curred. Repair and replacement of these supple-mental air bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impact airbags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition key should alwaysbe in the LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bag mod-ule and pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-7Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-14NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-19

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-23Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Compact disc holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Trunk divider (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31


Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34


1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turnsignal switch (P. 2-18)

2. Steering wheel switch for audio controland BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-35, 4-37)

3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn(P. 1-38, 2-22)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-20)6. Cruise control main/set switches (if so

equipped) (P. 5-16)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-17)

8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-23)9. Audio system (P. 4-15)10. Center ventilator (P. 4-6)11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-38)12. Control panel display (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)13. Side ventilator (P. 4-6)14. Glove box (P. 2-26)15. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-38)16. Climate control (P. 4-7)17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)18. Power outlet (P. 2-22)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-21)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-5)21. Tilt steering (P.3-26)22. Sunglasses holder(P. 2-24)23. Hood release lever (P. 3-22)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LIC1013

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


1. Tachometer2. Fuel gauge/odometer/transmission po-

sition indicator/engine temperaturegauge

3. Speedometer

4. Instrument brightness control/changebutton for twin trip odometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

LIC1014

LIC1015

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

To switch between the odometer and the twin tripodometers press the instrument brightness con-trol.

Changing the display

Push the instrument brightness control to changethe display as follows:

Odometer → Trip → Trip → Odom-eter

Resetting the trip odometer

Push the instrument brightness control/changebutton for more than 1 second to reset the tripodometer to zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

LIC1017 LIC1021



FUEL GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition key must be in the ON positionfor the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition key must be in the ON positionfor the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the reading is within thezone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC1016 LIC1020



CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.



or Anti-lock braking warning light(if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light (if soequipped)

Cruise SET switch indicator light (if soequipped)

or Brake warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light (if soequipped)

or Front passenger air bag statuslight

Charge warning light P position selecting warning light (CVT mod-els) (if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Door open warning light Seat belt warning light and chime) Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Electric power steering warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)

Engine oil pressure warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-sition indicator light

Security indicator light

Intelligent Key system warning light (if soequipped)

CRUISE main switch indicator light (if soequipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

or , , , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on brieflyand then go off:

or , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

or , , , , ,

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



If equipped, the following lights come on brieflyand then go off:

,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakingwarning light (if soequipped)

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-lock function is turned off, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.



Electric power steeringwarning light

WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control ofthe vehicle but the steering will beharder to operate. Have the powersteering system checked by a NISSANdealer.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the power steering warning light illuminates. Afterstarting the engine, the power steering warninglight turns off. This indicates the power steeringsystem is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminateswhile the engine is running, it may indicate thepower steering system is not functioning properlyand may need servicing. Have the power steeringsystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering but you will still havecontrol of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-ing effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

See “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving”section.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warninglight (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi-nates green when the ignition switch can beturned. The Intelligent Key system warning lightilluminates red when the ignition switch cannotbe turned.

The Intelligent Key system warning light blinksred if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of thevehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position.

● If the Intelligent Key system warning lightblinks, make sure of the location of the Intel-ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli-gent Key should be carried by the driverwhile operating the vehicle.

● The Intelligent Key system warning lightturns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli-gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system warning light blinksgreen indicating that the Intelligent Key battery isalmost discharged.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.



Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightilluminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information labelto turn the light OFF. The low tire pressure warn-ing light does not automatically turn off when the

tire pressure is adjusted to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure. After the tire is inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven over 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to adjust tire pressureto the recommended pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isturned ON. The light will remain on after the 1minute. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch turned ON, have the ve-hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer assoon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If the light still illuminates while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash. Contact your NISSAN dealeras soon as possible for tire replacementand/or system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.



CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

P position selecting warninglight (CVT models) (if soequipped)

The light blinks red and the warning buzzersounds if you are outside of the vehicle with theIntelligent Key and the engine is off, but theselector lever is not in the P (Park) position.

When the warning light blinks, turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position, move the selector

lever to the P position, then turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the system does not activate the warn-ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bags, supplemental sideair bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing andyour vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly. Foradditional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems (if soequipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.



INDICATOR LIGHTSContinuously VariableTransmission (CVT) positionindicator light (CVT models)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, this indicator light shows the CVT selectorlever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

or Front passengerair bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (or ) will be lit and the passenger front airbag will be OFF depending on how the frontpassenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come onsteady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,

and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.



● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-gine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light(CVT models)

The overdrive off indicator light illuminates whenthe overdrive off mode is selected.

For additional information, see “Continuous Vari-able Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.


For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This lightblinks whenever the ignition switch is in theLOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinkswhen the ignition switch is in the LOCK positionwith the key removed from the ignition switch.

The blinking security indicator light indicates thatthe security systems equipped on the vehicle areoperational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Intelligent Key door buzzer (if soequipped)The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any oneof the following improper operations is found.

● The ignition switch is not returned to theLOCK position when locking the doors.

● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehiclewhen locking the doors.

● The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-hicle when operating the vehicle.

● Any doors are not closed securely whenlocking the doors.



When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “Intelli-gent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if soequipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-gent Key models).

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)



● any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-els).

● the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:

● Push the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key, a requestswitch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if theignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door with the key, a requestswitch or by pressing the button onthe keyfob or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key, arequest switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key(even if the door is unlocked by using theinside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key, pressing the button onthe keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking alldoors with any request switch (Intelligent Keymodels).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.



2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.


For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This lightblinks whenever the ignition switch is in theLOCK, OFF or ACC position.

For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinkswhen the ignition switch is in the LOCK positionwith the key removed from the ignition switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

LIC0474



If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob towardsA (Slower) or sB (Faster).

s2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

s3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

LIC0720

Type ALIC0706

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

Type BLIC0688 WIC0859



WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in theor position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

WIC1018 WIC0860



FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

WIC0861 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The power outlet is located on the bottom centerportion of the instrument panel. The outlet is forpowering electrical accessories such as cellulartelephones. It is rated at 12 Volt, 120W (10A)maximum.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● The power outlets are not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

WIC1039 LIC1022

HORN POWER OUTLET



MAP POCKETS STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (ifso equipped)

To open the storage tray, push and release. Thestorage tray will automatically move to the openposition.

LIC1023 WIC1036

LIC1024

STORAGE



● The inside of the storage tray can get hot. Donot place objects inside which can melt orbe easily deformed.

WARNING

Keep the tray lid closed while driving tohelp prevent contents from becoming pro-jectiles causing injury in an accident orduring a sudden stop.

SEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERPull the lid down to open the sunglasses holder.

WIC1033 LIC1025



CUP HOLDERS

Adjust the cup holder size by turning the adjust-ment knob and sliding the cup holder divider tothe desired position.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Lower the rear center armrest to access the cupholders.

FrontLIC1027

RearWIC1097



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking s1 or unlocking s2 theglove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOXTo open the console box, press in on the lever s1and raise the lid s2 .

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

COMPACT DISC HOLDER (if soequipped)To use the compact disc holder, lower the driverside visor. The holder can be removed by pullingdown on the tab.

CAUTION

Do not leave compact discs in direct sun-light. The heat may damage the compactdiscs.

WIC1029 LIC1026 LIC1028



TRUNK DIVIDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

The trunk divider does not contain anysecure locking mechanisms so it shouldnot be used as a secure storage forvaluables.

The trunk divider allows for the creation of ahidden storage compartment in the trunk or whenlowered, a temporary storage surface for wetitems.

The trunk divider can be accessed through thelowering of the rear seats or the trunk.

Once the rear seats have been lowered, the trunkdivider can be opened by pressing down on thesecuring latch and pushing the divider toward therear of the vehicle. For more information on thelowering of rear seats, see “Folding rear seats” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

Access the trunk divider by opening the trunk. Toremove the trunk divider, press down on securinglatch s1 and lower the trunk divider to about 45°.Pull and lift the divider out of the holding bracketss2 to remove from the trunk.

Accessing through rear seatsLIC1030

Accessing through trunkLIC1031



CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from thecargo net retainers.

WIC1032 LIC0802



POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger’s side window switch4. Right rear passenger’s window switch5. Left rear passenger’s window switch6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1100

WINDOWS



Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down s1 .To close the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

LIC0695 LIC0718 LIC0410



When power window switch does notoperateSome power window functions may become in-operable after the battery terminal is discon-nected, the electrical supply interrupted and/orsome abnormality detected. Use the followingreset procedure to return the power window op-eration to normal.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. If the window is closed, open it more thanhalfway by operating the window switch.

NOTE:

If the window is already open more thanhalfway, go to the next step.

3. Pull up and hold the window switch to closethe window. Hold the switch for approxi-mately 4 seconds after the window has fullyclosed, then release it.

4. Check the window to be sure the powerwindow functions operate properly.

If the power window functions do not operateproperly after performing the above procedure,see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

MANUAL WINDOWSThe side windows can be opened or closed byturning the hand crank on each door.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF

This sunroof only operates with the ignitionswitch in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the battery is discharged or is discon-nected, the sunroof may not operate cor-rectly, and must be reset.

From any sunroof position (full open, partiallyopen, closed, partially vented and vented), pushand hold the button in the forward position untilthe sunroof vents in the full-up position. Thisresets the sunroof motor memory and now thesunroof will operate correctly.

WIC0263 LIC1035

SUNROOF (if so equipped)



Sliding the sunroof

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switchtoward DOWN/OPEN. The sunroof will stopwhen the switch is released or when the sunroofis fully open.

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switchtoward UP/CLOSE. The sunroof will stop whenthe switch is released or when the sunroof is fullyclosed.

Tilting the sunroof

Close the sunroof by pushing and holding theswitch toward UP/CLOSE. Release the switch,then push and hold the UP/CLOSE switch to tiltthe sunroof up. The sunroof will stop when theswitch is released or when the sunroof reachesthe maximum tilt position.

To tilt the sunroof down, push and hold the switchtoward DOWN/OPEN. The sunroof will stopwhen the switch is released or when the sunroofis fully closed.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

Restarting the sunroof switch

The sunroof switch may not operate properlyafter the battery terminal is disconnected, theelectrical supply interrupted and/or some mal-function is detected. Use the following reset pro-cedure to return sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof is open, close it fully by repeat-edly pushing the UP/CLOSE side of thesunroof switch.

2. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of thesunroof switch to tilt the sunroof up.

3. Release the sunroof switch after the sunroofmoves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the DOWN/OPEN side of thesunroof switch to fully tilt the sunroof down.

5. Check if the sunroof switch operates nor-mally.

If the sunroof still does not operate properly, havethe sunroof system checked, and if necessaryrepaired, by a NISSAN dealer.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the sunroof)The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe sunroof is closed or tilted down by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the sunroof.



When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willimmediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-ately tilt up.

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradu-ally. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position s1 , theinterior light illuminates, regardless of door posi-tion.

When the switch is in the center O position, theinterior light illuminates by opening a door.

The interior light will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the lock-unlock switch while all doors areclosed and the key is removed from theignition switch.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The interior light will turn off while the 30 secondtimer is activated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey or the lock-unlock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position s2 , theinterior light does not illuminate, regardless ofdoor position.

Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saverfeature that will automatically turn off the interiorlights after approximately 10 minutes if:

● doors are open, or

● the interior light switch is in the ON position.

WIC0264

INTERIOR LIGHT



NOTE:

If the interior lights are turned off automati-cally by the battery saver feature, the igni-tion key must be turned to the ON positionbefore the interior lights will illuminateagain.

For information regarding the interior light bulbreplacement, refer to “Exterior and interior lights”in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery. To turn the map lights on, press the button. To

turn them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

LIC1034

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) TRUNK LIGHT



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Intelligent keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Remote keyless entry system (models without Intel-ligent Key system) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Key operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Transponder chip3. Key number plateA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.These keys have a transponder chip in the keyhead.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

LPD0348

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System components. As manyas 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and usedwith one vehicle. The new keys must be regis-tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with theIntelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-

istration process requires erasing all memory inthe Intelligent Key components when registeringnew keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys thatyou have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,which can be used in case of a discharged bat-tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation inthe same way as an ordinary key.

WPD0363 SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

ManualTo lock a door, turn the key toward the front of thevehicle s1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rears2 .

Driver’s sideLPD0349

DOORS



Power (if so equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the vehiclesecurity system, the power door lock systemallows you to lock or unlock all doors at the sametime.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again s4 within 5 seconds un-locks all doors.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

LPD0240

Inside lockWPD0291

Door lock switchWPD0381


Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Sentra (sen)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)07/18/06—arosenma X

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-matically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position s1 , thedoor can be opened from the outside or theinside.

When the lever is in the lock position s2 ,the door can be opened only from the out-side.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn theinterior lights on, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends on the conditions around thevehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

LIC0716

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(models without Intelligent Keysystem) (if so equipped)



● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once to indicate alldoors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once as a reminder thatthe doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” later in thissection for details.

LPD0209



Unlocking doorsPush the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionkey in any position except the ON position.

● The interior light turns on and the light timeractivates for 30 seconds when the switch isin the center O position with the ignition keyin any position except the ON position.

Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning it to the ON or START posi-tion, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushingthe interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relockWhen the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Releasing the trunk lidPush the button on the keyfob for longerthan 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunkrelease button on the keyfob will not operatewhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

LPD0210 WPD0319



Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Using the interior lightPush the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier inthis manual.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

LPD0211 LPD0262



The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-tric medical equipment. Those who use apacemaker should contact the electricmedical equipment manufacturer for thepossible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all thedoor locks using the remote controller function orpushing the request switch on the vehicle withouttaking the key out from a pocket or purse. Theoperating environment and/or conditions may af-fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key system.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.Environmental conditions may interfere with theoperation of the Intelligent Key system under thefollowing operating conditions.

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if soequipped)



Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.



OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch s1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch s1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry thekey with you and then lock the doors.

SPA2038 WPD0375



● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

Locking doors

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion. (Remove the key if any key is in theignition switch.)

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch s1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0376 WPD0377



NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while a mechanical key is in the igni-tion switch or the ignition switch is pushedin.

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handles or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

The lockout protection may function whenthe Intelligent Key is outside the vehiclebut it is too close to the vehicle.

WPD0369



Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch s1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch s1again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light timer illuminates for 30 secondswhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingfor 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-ing operations.

● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

WPD0377 WPD0369



Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch sA formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will soundfour times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WPD0401 WPD0359



CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within 1 minuteto unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the button.

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds whena door is unlocked and the room light switch is inthe DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30seconds by performing one of the following op-erations.

● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

WPD0360



Releasing the trunk lidPush the button for longer than 0.5 sec-ond to open the trunk lid. The trunk release buttonwill not operate when the ignition switch is in theON position.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

WPD0364 WPD0361 WPD0362



The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

s1 P position selecting warning lights2 Intelligent Key system warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLEREMINDERS

The Intelligent Key system is equipped with afunction that is designed to minimize improperoperations and to help prevent the vehicle frombeing stolen. The warning buzzer sounds and thewarning light illuminates when improper opera-tions are detected.

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warninglight illuminates, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning light comes onin the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warninglight comes on, be sure to check the vehicle andthe Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning whenlocking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from insideand outside the vehicle, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is turned to the LOCKposition.

● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-hicle.

● The selector lever is in the P position.

WPD0382



Audible reminder and warning whenthe engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the Pposition.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the Pposition and the ignition switch is turned tothe LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-er’s door is opened, check the following:

● The selector lever is in the P position and theignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion.

● The mechanical key is not inserted into theignition switch.

● The warning chime may stop when one ofthe following is performed:

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

– Removing the mechanical key.

– Closing the doors.

Alarm and warning when the enginestarts

When the Intelligent Key system warning light( ) blinks red and the outside buzzersounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle.

Warning for low battery power

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position. This warningis to let you know that the battery of the IntelligentKey will run down soon. Replace it with a newone. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at aNISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key frombeing left in the vehicle

If you lock all doors using the power door lockswitch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all ofthe doors unlock immediately and the buzzer willwarn you when the door is closed.



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handlerequest switch

The front door beep sounds for approximately 2seconds.

The doors cannot be locked.Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and pushthe door handle request switch.

When closing the doors

The front door beep sounds for approximately 10seconds.

The ignition knob is not turnedto LOCK position.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

The key warning light in the instrument panel blinks inred and the front door warning beep sounds for ap-proximately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in thevehicle.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The front door beep sounds for approximately 3 sec-onds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is left in thevehicle.

Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle and closethe door.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.The ignition knob is not in LOCKposition, or the mechanical keyis inserted into the ignition knob.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

Remove the mechanical key from the ignition knob.

When stopping the engine The P position warning light in the instrument panelblinks in red.

The selector lever is not in the P(Park) position.

Make sure that the selector lever is in the P (Park) po-sition and turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument panel blinks ingreen.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See “Battery re-placement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

When turning the ignitionswitch

A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not turnedto the LOCK position.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

When pushing the ignitionswitch

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the instru-ment panel illuminates red.

The Intelligent Key is not in thevehicle.

If the Intelligent Key system warning light illuminatesred even while you are carrying the Intelligent Key, thebattery is completely discharged. Replace the batterywith a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.



1. Pull the hood lock release handle s1 locatedbelow the instrument panel until the hoodsprings up slightly.

2. Locate the lever s2 in between the hood andgrille and push the lever sideways with yourfingertips.

3. Raise the hood s3 .

4. Remove the support rod s4 and insert it intothe slot on the underside of the hood s5 .

When closing the hood, first return the supportrod to its original position. Slowly move the hooddown to latch the lock. Push the hood down tolock the hood securely into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.WPD0383

HOOD TRUNK LID



TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCHThe trunk lid release switch is located on the floorto the left of the driver’s seat. To open the trunklid, pull the trunk lid release switch.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

You can also open the trunk lid with the keyfob orIntelligent Key (if so equipped). Refer to “Remotekeyless entry system” or “Intelligent Key system”earlier in this section.

KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. Toclose the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

Driver’s sideWPD0390 WPD0384 WPD0385



To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door release is located on the floorto the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-filler door, push the release. To lock, close thefuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

LPD0386 LPD0387

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.



TILT OPERATIONPush the lock lever s1 down and adjust thesteering wheel up or down s2 to the desiredposition.

Pull the lock lever up to lock the steering wheel inplace.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

To block out glare from the front, swing down thesun visor s1 .

To block glare from the side, remove the sun visorfrom the center mount and swing it to the side s2 .

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

LPD0388

SIC2872

LPD0389

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS



REARVIEW MIRRORThe night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

Electric control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

WPD0126 WPD0274

MIRRORS



Manual control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror can be moved in any directionfor a better rear view.

Heated mirrors (Canada only)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press therear window defroster switch to activate the heat-ing function. Press the switch again to deactivate,or the heating function will automatically turn offafter approximately 15 minutes.

LPD0029



4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2How to use the TRIP INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the AUDIO button(for control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Door warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-10Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-15Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Steering wheel switch for audio control(If so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49


WARNING

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

WHA0700

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems


1. TRIP INFO button (P. 4-3)2. CLOCK DISP button (P. 4-5)3. AUDIO button (P. 4-5)When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

TRIP INFO button — This is a button on thecontrol panel. By pressing this button you canselect the item or perform this action.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP INFOBUTTONWhen the TRIP INFO button is pressed, thefollowing modes will display on the screen.

Dist. to Empty → Average Speed → FuelEconomy → Trip Time → Audio or OFF → Dist. toEmpty

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to — .

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

WHA0701

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3


Average speed (MPH or km/h)The Average Speed mode shows the averagespeed since the last reset. To calculate the aver-age speed, driving distance is divided by drivingtime.

For approximately the first 30 seconds after areset or reconnecting the battery cables, thedisplay will show —.

Resetting average speed

The average speed calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap-proximately 2 seconds.

Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fueleconomy since the last reset.

For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show —.

Resetting fuel economy

The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap-proximately 2 seconds.

Trip timeThe trip time mode displays the trip time since thelast reset.

The maximum time that can be displayed by theTrip Time screen is 99 hours : 59 minutes : 59seconds.

Resetting trip time

The Trip Time calculation can be reset to 0. Pressthe TRIP INFO button for more than approxi-mately 2 seconds.

WHA0702 WHA0703 WHA0704



CLOCK

The digital clock displays the time when the igni-tion key is in OFF, ACC or ON. To enable theclock display, press the CLOCK DISP button.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

Adjusting the time

The audio system must be turned off to adjust thetime.

To adjust the time, press and hold the CLOCKDISP button for more than approximately 1.5seconds. Hour Adjust will appear on the screenand the hours will start flashing.

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust thehour.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. MinuteAdjust will appear on the screen and the minuteswill start flashing.

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust theminutes.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Clock IsSet will appear on the screen.

NOTE:

If you enter the clock adjustment mode anddo not press any button for approximately 7seconds, the screen will change to Clock IsSet. The screen will exit out of the clockadjustment mode and return to the audio oroff screen.

HOW TO USE THE AUDIO BUTTON(for control panel)

The audio system must be turned on to accessthis menu.

Pressing the AUDIO button will changethe settings menu as follows:

Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →Speed Sense Volume → Beep ON/OFF → Lan-guage → Audio or OFF → Bass

For additional information, see “Audio System”later in this section.

Beep on/off

To turn off the beep, press the TUNE button toselect “OFF”. This will disable the beep soundduring menu selection (except some cautionbeep sounds).

LanguageThe language can be changed to “ENGLISH” or“FRANÇAIS” by pressing the TUNE button.



DOOR WARNINGThe DOOR OPEN screen will be automaticallydisplayed any time a door or the trunk is open.

If the door is open for longer than 10 seconds thescreen will no longer display which door is open,but the DOOR OPEN warning will remain untilthe door is closed.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-senger’s side s1 , and center s2 ventilators bymoving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-semblies.

Open or close the ventilators s1 by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open the ven-tilators or toward the to close them.

WHA0705 WHA0772

VENTILATORS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air flow control dial5. Rear window defroster

Type AWHA0470

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



1. Fan control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning if so equipped).

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

NOTE:

The air recirculation feature is availableonly on those vehicles equipped with airconditioning.

On position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Type BLHA0440



Off position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button (if soequipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switchFor more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the off position fornormal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the off position.


3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.


2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.


● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate). In thisposition, the A/C cannot be turned off.When the air flow control is turned to anyposition other than or the A/Clight will illuminate (the A/C will continueoperating) and can be turned off using theA/C button. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.



Bi-level heating

This mode directs air from the side, center andthe foot outlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate). In thisposition, the A/C cannot be turned off.When the air flow control is turned to any

position other than or the A/Clight will illuminate (the A/C will continueoperating) and can be turned off using theA/C button. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (ifso equipped)Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.


2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/Cor position.


4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling. MAX A/C may be usedfor quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.








Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.




When the or position is selected,the air conditioner automatically turns on (how-ever, the indicator light will not illuminate). In thisposition, the A/C cannot be turned off. When theair flow control is turned to any position otherthan or the A/C light will illuminate(the A/C will continue operating) and can beturned off using the A/C button. This dehumidi-fies the air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips● Keep the windows and sunroof closed while

the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.



WHA0695 WHA0696



WHA0697 WHA0698



The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA0699

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the POWER/VOLUME control knob toturn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, the key should be turned tothe ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example, they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

AUDIO SYSTEM



the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099



● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 CD).

Compact Disc with MP3Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of theencoded MP3 file that contains informationabout the digital music file such as song title,artist, album title, encoding bit rate, tracktime duration, etc. ID3 tag information isdisplayed on the Album/Artist/Track title lineon the display.



Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed files(MP3) is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“ROOT” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA0543



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512

Text character number limitation 31 characters

Displayable character codes01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:(UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder namesand file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. SEEK button2. CD insert slot3. CD eject button4. TUNE button5. AUDIO/CLOCK button

6. RPT·SCAN button7. AUX IN jack8. POWER/VOLUME control knob9. Station select (1 - 6) buttons10. RADIO button

11. CD·AUX button12. PRESET A·B·C button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

Audio main operationPOWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

AUDIO/CLOCK button (Bass, Treble, Fade,Balance, Beep):

Press the AUDIO/CLOCK button to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → BeepON/OFF → Audio or OFF → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO/CLOCK button until the desired

Type ALHA0689



mode appears in the display. Press the TUNEbutton to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the TUNE button to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press theTUNE button up or down. This will enable ordisable the beep sound heard during menu se-lection.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO/CLOCK buttonrepeatedly until the radio or CD display reap-pears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display willautomatically reappear after about 5 seconds.

Clock operation

Press the AUDIO/CLOCK button to display theclock when the radio is off.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the AUDIO/CLOCK buttonfor more than 2 seconds to enter the clockset mode.

2. Press the AUDIO/CLOCK button until thehour flashes in the display screen, thenpress the TUNE button or toadjust the hour.

3. Press the AUDIO/CLOCK button again untilthe minutes flash in the display screen, thenpress the TUNE button or toadjust the minutes.

4. Press the AUDIO/CLOCK button again toexit the clock set mode.

FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM

When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE button:

Press the TUNE button or formanual tuning.

To move quickly through the channels, press andhold either the or button.

SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK button or to tunefrom high to low or low to high frequencies andstop at the next broadcasting station.

RPT·SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the RPT·SCAN button to stop at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN willilluminate in the display while scan tuning. Press-ing the RPT·SCAN button again during this 5second period will stop the scan tuning and theradio will remain tuned to that station. If theRPT·SCAN button is not pressed within 5 sec-onds, scan tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.



2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,and carefully insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side up. The compact disc is auto-matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD·AUX button:

When the CD·AUX button is pressed with acompact disc loaded and the radio playing, theradio turns off and the compact disc starts toplay.

TUNE (Rewind or FastForward) button:

When the TUNE button or ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK button:

When the SEEK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track follow-ing the present one starts to play from the begin-ning. Press the SEEK button several timesto skip several tracks. Each time the button ispressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. Thetrack number appears in the display window.(When the last track on the compact disc isskipped, the first track is played.)

When the SEEK button is pressed, thetrack being played returns to the beginning.Press the SEEK button several times toskip back several tracks. Each time the button ispressed the CD moves back 1 track.

RPT·SCAN button:

When the RPT·SCAN button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

RPT TRACK ←→ MIX DISC ←→ Normal

RPT TRACK: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.

MIX DISC: The order of the tracks on the disc willbe mixed during play.

RPT·SCAN (CDs) button:

Press and hold the RPT·SCAN button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10seconds of a track on the compact disc. TheSCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall the tracks on the disc, or if the RPT·SCANbutton is pressed during the scan mode.

CD·AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-puters.

Press the CD·AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.



When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

This indicator appears on the display whena CD is loaded with the system on.

1. pause/mute button2. CD insert slot3. CD eject button4. MIX/RPT button5. CLOCK DISP button

6. TUNE (CATEGORY) button7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,

Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped),Beep and Language)

8. AUX jack

Type BWHA0690



9. POWER/VOLUME control knob10. SCAN button11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK (CHANNEL) button13. RADIO* button14. CD/AUX button15. PRESET A·B·C button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theRADIO button is pressed unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satel-lite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if soequipped)


No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ sat-ellite radio service subscription is active. Satelliteradio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) whichwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep andLanguage):

Press the AUDIO button to change themode as follows:

Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) → BeepON/OFF → Language → Audio or OFF → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired modeappears in the display. Press the TUNE button toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You

can also use the TUNE button to adjust Faderand Balance modes. Fader adjusts the soundlevel between the front and rear speakers andBalance adjusts the sound between the right andleft speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 toLEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press theTUNE button left or right. This will enable ordisable the beep sound heard during menu se-lection.

To change the Language to English or Français,press the TUNE button left or right.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 5 seconds.

CLOCK DISP (display) button:

Pressing the CLOCK DISP (display) button willshow text information about CD or SAT (satellite,if so equipped) in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the CLOCK DISP button. TheCLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll



through CD text as follows: Track number andTrack time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCKDISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scrollthrough the broadcast information as follows:Channel number ←→ Category name ←→Channel name ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.

● Channel number displays the channel num-ber of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category nameof the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name ofthe selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK DISP button displays theclock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCKDISP button again to turn off the clock display.

For additional information on setting the clock,see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.

pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, pressthe pause/mute button.

Press the button again to resume the au-dio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:


AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)


No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ sat-ellite radio service subscription is active. Satelliteradio can only be installed in vehicles that werefactory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Ifsatellite radio is not operational then the RADIObutton is used to toggle between AM and FMbands.


The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (tuning) button:

To manually tune the radio, press the TUNEbutton or .





Press the SEEK button or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or lowto high frequencies and stop at the next broad-casting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button to stop at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing thebutton again during this 5 second period will stopscan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the SCAN button is not pressedwithin 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the nextstation.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.




Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

CD/AUX button:

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.



TUNE (Rewind and FastForward) button:

When the TUNE button or ispressed while the compact disc is being played,the compact disc will play while rewinding or fastforwarding. When the button is released, thecompact disc will return to normal play speed.

SEEK button:

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,the track being played returns to its beginning.Press button several times to skip backthrough tracks. The compact disc will go back thenumber of times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press button several times to skip throughtracks. The compact disc will advance the num-ber of times the button is pressed. (When the lasttrack on the compact disc is skipped through, thefirst track will be played.)

MIX/RPT (mix and repeat) button:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Track → Mix All Tracks →Repeat All

Repeat All: the entire disc will be repeatedRepeat Track: the current track will be repeatedMix All Tracks: all tracks will be played randomly

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCANbutton to preview the first 10 seconds of eachtrack on the CD playing. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 10 second periodstops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.



1. LOAD button2. CD insert slot3. CD eject button4. MIX/RPT button5. CLOCK DISP button6. TUNE (CAT·FOLDER) button

7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped),Beep and Language)

8. AUX jack9. POWER/VOLUME control knob10. SCAN button

11. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK (CH·FILE) button13. RADIO* button14. CD/AUX button15. PRESET A·B·C button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theRADIO button is pressed unless op-tional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satel-lite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER


No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

WHA0691



Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) whichwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep andLanguage):

Press the AUDIO button to change themode as follows:

Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) → BeepON/OFF → Language → Audio or OFF → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired modeappears in the display. Press the TUNE button toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You

can also use the TUNE button to adjust Faderand Balance modes. Fader adjusts the soundlevel between the front and rear speakers andBalance adjusts the sound between the right andleft speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 toLEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press theTUNE button left or right. This will enable ordisable the beep sound heard during menu se-lection.

To change the Language to English or Français,press the TUNE button left or right.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 5 seconds.

CLOCK DISP (display) button:

Pressing the CLOCK DISP (display) button willshow text information about CD or MP3 and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the CLOCK DISP button. TheCLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll

through CD text as follows: Track number andTrack time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to aCD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the CLOCKDISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scrollthrough the CD text as follows: Disc number,Track number and Folder number ←→ Folder title←→ Album title ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.

● Disc number displays the number of thecurrent disc playing.

● Track number displays the number of thetrack playing on the selected disc.

● Folder number displays the number of thecurrent folder on the MP3 CD.

● Folder title displays the title of the folder.



● Album title displays the title of the album ofthe song playing.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist ofthe song playing.

● Song title displays the title of the song play-ing.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCKDISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scrollthrough the broadcast information as follows:Channel number ←→ Category name ←→Channel name ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.

● Channel number displays the channel num-ber of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category nameof the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name ofthe selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK DISP button displays theclock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCKDISP button again to turn off the clock display.

For additional information on setting the clock,see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:


AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)


No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ sat-ellite radio service subscription is active. Satelliteradio can only be installed in vehicles that werefactory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Ifsatellite radio is not operational then the RADIObutton is used to toggle between AM and FMbands.


The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (tuning) button:

To manually tune the radio, press the TUNEbutton or .



Press the SEEK button or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or lowto high frequencies and stop at the next broad-casting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button to stop at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing thebutton again during this 5 second period will stopscan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the SCAN button is not pressedwithin 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the nextstation.



PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.




Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operationTurn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the but-ton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the POWERbutton will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the loadbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theload button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD/AUX button:

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

TUNE (Rewind and FastForward) button:

While playing a compact disc without MP3 pressthe TUNE button (rewind) or (fastforward), the compact disc will play while rewind-ing or fast forwarding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.



MP3 TUNE (CAT•FOLDER)button:

While playing an MP3, press the TUNEbutton or to scan forward or back-ward through available folders.

To fast forward or rewind through an audio track,press the TUNE button or for morethan 1.5 seconds.

SEEK button:

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD isplaying, the track or file being played returns to itsbeginning. Press button several times toskip back through tracks or files. The CD or MP3CD will go back the number of times the button ispressed.

When the SEEK button button is pressedfor less than 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CDis playing, the next track or file will start to playfrom its beginning. Press button severaltimes to skip through tracks or files. The CD orMP3 CD will advance the number of times thebutton is pressed. When the last track or file onthe CD or MP3 CD is skipped through, the firsttrack or file will be played. If there are multipleCDs in the CD changer, when the last track or fileis skipped through, the next CD will start to play.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

MIX/RPT button:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while acompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Track → MixAll Discs → Mix Disc → Repeat All

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be playedrandomly.Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currentlyplaying will be played randomly.Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, withno special play pattern enabled.

MP3 MIX/RPT mode:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while anMP3 compact disc is being played, the playpattern can be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Folder →Repeat Track → Mix All Disc → Mix Disc → MixFolder → Repeat All

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Repeat Folder: The folder selected that is cur-rently playing will be repeated.Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be playedrandomly.Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currentlyplaying will be played randomly.Mix Folder: Tracks from that folder that is cur-rently accessed will be played randomly.Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, withno special play pattern enabled.

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCANbutton to preview the first 10 seconds of eachtrack on the CD playing. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 10 second periodstops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

MP3 SCAN mode:

While listening to an MP3 CD, press theSCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds ofeach file in the current folder. The scan will con-tinue on to the next folder and files if there is morethan one folder on the MP3 CD. Pressing



the SCAN button again during this 10second period stops the scan and the MP3 CDremains in that folder.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence, theentire disc eject sequence will be canceled.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

LHA0049



● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Tuning switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Volume control switch

1. Tuning switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Volume control switchSTEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (If so equipped)The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switchWith the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

Type ALHA0692

Type BWHA0693



If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition keyturned to the ACC or ON position push theMODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switchPush the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: Preset A → Preset B→ Preset C → CD* → AUX**.

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switchPush the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-ous radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove the antenna,turn the antenna rod counterclockwise sB .

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rodclockwise sA and hand tighten.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rodduring installation or the antenna rod maybreak during vehicle operation.

LHA0709



When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions, otherwise the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, usea phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)



Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System. If you are an ownerof a BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, you canset up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothTcellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visit www.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for a recommendedphone list.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive radio waves; such as ina tunnel, in an underground parking ga-rage, near a tall building or in a mountain-ous area.

LHA0706



– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal orambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult tohear the other person’s voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area sur-rounded by metal or far away from the in-vehiclephone module to prevent tone quality degrada-tion and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through theBluetoothT wireless connection, the batterypower of the cellular phone may dischargequicker than usual.

If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, please refer to “Troubleshootingguide” later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual re-garding the telephone charges, cellular phoneantenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-ronment. This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20cm) between the radiator and your body. ThisTransmitter must not be co-located or operatingin conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-ter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the BluetoothT PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the amber light on the overhead console illumi-nates and the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressed beforethe initialization completes, the system will an-nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. The light on the overhead con-sole flashes to signal you have entered a voicerecognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds,speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.



● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two oh oh”

● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # atany time in any position of the phone num-ber.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.



CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SENDPress the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/ENDPress the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” later in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the BluetoothT Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

Note: You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press(PHONE/END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

LHA0707



5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” sA

“Pair Phone” sB

“New Phone” sC

Initiate from handset sD

Name phone sE

Assign priority sF

Choose ringtone sG

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” sB . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” sC . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset sD .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a PIN code, enter“1234” from the handset. The PIN code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone sE .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority levelsF . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetoothT phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system orrefer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone sG . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” sA

Number (speak digits) sB

“Dial” sC

1. Press the button on steering wheel. Atone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.



3. Say the number you wish to call sB . Forexample, 555-1212 can be said as “five fivefive one two one two.” See “How to saynumbers” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” sC . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a callWhen you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

Name (speak name) sA


“Redial” sC

“Call Back” sD

Name (speak name) sA

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.



When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”earlier in this section for more details.

“Redial” sC

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” sD

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers during a call. Forexample, if you were directed to dial an ex-tension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.



“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” sA

“Edit” sB

“Delete” sC

9List Names” sD

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” sA

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location and asksfor a number.

For example, say: “five five five one twoone two.” See “How to say numbers”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.

“Edit” sB

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system ac-knowledges and asks you for the phone numberyou would like to store with this location.

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.



To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” sD

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete thesystem ends the VR session.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” sA

“Play” sB

“Delete” sC

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Record” sA

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” sB

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” sA

“List Phone” sB

“Select Phone” sC

“Change Priority” sD

“Delete Phone” sE

“Select Ringtone” sF

“Bluetooth Off” sG

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” sA

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone tothe BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.



NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” earlier in this sectionfor additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”earlier in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier inthis section.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” sB

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.

“Select phone” sC

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isturned OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change priority” sD

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired BluetoothTphone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” sE

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.



NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” sF

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say no, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” sG

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

When the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, the press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.



11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrasesDuring the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.



Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Intelligent Key System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . 5-7Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Anti-lock braking system (ABS)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


WARNING

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.


EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton (if so equipped) to off and the fancontrol dial to 4 (high) to circulatethe air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

Starting and driving 5-3


● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After the tire is inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.



AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey alltraffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, highspeed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,because these driving practices could cause youto lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, loss of control could result in a colli-sion with other vehicles or objects, or causethe vehicle to roll over, particularly if theloss of control causes the vehicle to slidesideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoiddriving when tired. Never drive when under theinfluence of alcohol or drugs (including prescrip-tion or over-the-counter drugs which may causedrowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as out-lined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section of this manual,and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH



INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if soequipped)

The Intelligent Key system can operate the igni-tion switch without taking the key out from yourpocket or purse. The operating environmentand/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Keysystem operation.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged theignition switch cannot be moved fromthe “LOCK” position and if the steeringlock is engaged, the steering wheelcannot be moved. Charge the battery assoon as possible. (See “JUMP START-ING” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion of this manual.)

LSD0175

Without Intelligent Key system

WSD0052



CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to the LOCK positionuntil the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position. When moving the ignition switch to theLOCK position, to remove the key from the igni-tion switch, make sure the selector lever is in theP (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to theLOCK position:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignitionswitch.

If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion, the selector lever cannot be moved from theP (Park) position.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

To lock the steering wheel:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Remove the key, if it is inserted in the ignitionswitch.

3. Turn the steering wheel 1/8 of a turn clock-wise from the straight up position.

To unlock the steering wheel:

1. Insert the key into the ignition switch, if nec-essary.

2. Gently turn the ignition switch while rotatingthe steering wheel slightly right and left.

With Intelligent Key systemLSD0175



MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helpsprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ONposition, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, thenturn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

Intelligent Key system:

PUSH OFF- The steering lock can only be lockedat this position.

PUSH ON- The ignition switch will be unlockedwhile carrying the Intelligent Key.

OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking thesteering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

WSD0052



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windowwasher fluid as frequently as possible, or atleast whenever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. CVT model:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

Manual transmission model:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depressthe clutch pedal to the floor while crankingthe engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

Intelligent Key system models: Slowly“PUSH ON” the ignition switch. When theIntelligent Key system warning light inthe meter illuminates in green, the ignitionswitch can be turned.

The Intelligent Key must be carriedwhen operating the ignition switch.

When the Intelligent Key system warninglight in the meter blinks in red and theinside warning buzzer emits a short beep, besure that the selector lever is in the P (Park)position and the ignition switch is securelyreturned to the LOCK position.

The Intelligent Key system warninglight blinking in red, turns off by per-forming the following operations:

● Return the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

● Turn the ignition switch to the ACC posi-tion.

When the buzzer beeps 4 times continu-ously, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is returned to theLOCK position.

● The mechanical key is not inserted intothe ignition switch.

The inside warning buzzer stops when oneof the following is performed:

● Return the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



● Remove the mechanical key from the ig-nition switch.

● Close the doors.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed.

To move the selector lever:

Push the button sA while depressing thebrake pedal

Push the button sA to shift

Shift without pushing button sA

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever from P(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany drive position, the shift selector lever cannotbe moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key cannotbe turned to the LOCK position and be removedfrom the ignition switch. If this occurs, performthe following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-tion key to the LOCK position to remove thekey.

LSD0177



P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed and the selectorlever button pushed in to move the selectorlever from the N (Neutral) or any drive po-sition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selecting R(Reverse) position. R (Reverse) speed is limitedto 25 MPH (40 km/h). Do not exceed 25 MPH(40 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed and the selectorlever button pushed in to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low):

Use this position for maximum engine braking onsteep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopesand whenever approaching sharp bends. Do notuse the L (Low) position in any other circum-stances.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

LSD0178



To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the CVTas soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with theselector lever in the D (Drive) position, thelight in the instrument panel illuminates. See“Overdrive off indicator light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-proved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/DOFF switch again. The indicator light willturn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when theselector lever is shifted to any position other than

D (Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be auto-matically turned off.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT willnot be shifted into the selected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated, see “Malfunction indicator light(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-tion. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, turn the ignition switch to the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Then turnthe switch back to the ON position. Thevehicle should return to its normal operat-ing condition. If it does not return to itsnormal operating condition, have aNISSAN dealer check the transmission andrepair if necessary.

LSD0179



WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially care-ful when driving. If necessary, pull to theside of the road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return to normal op-eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. Ifthe clutch pedal is not fully depressed before thetransmission is shifted, a gear noise may beheard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accordingto vehicle speed.

LSD0180



To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring s1 andthen move it to the R (Reverse) position afterstopping the vehicle completely.

The shift lever ring returns to its original positionwhen the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 36 (58)

5th to 6th 51 (82)

Suggested maximum speed in eachgearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 27 (44)

2nd 49 (79)

3rd 68 (109)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE



To engage: Pull the lever up sA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-tion.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button and lower com-pletely sB .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WSD0048 LSD0176

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)



● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off imme-diately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector lever to N(Neutral) (CVT).



To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forCVT models or in an appropriate gearfor manual transmission models. Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-tion. When parking on an uphill grade, placethe shift lever in 1st gear.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: s3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

WARNING

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

● When the power steering warning lightilluminates with the engine running,there will be no power assist for thesteering. You will still have control ofthe vehicle but the steering will beharder to operate. Have the powersteering system checked by a NISSANdealer.

The power steering system is designed to pro-vide power assist while driving to operate thesteering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedlyor continuously while parking or driving at a verylow speed, the power assist for the steeringwheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-heating of the power steering system and protectit from getting damaged. While the power assistis reduced, steering wheel operation will becomeheavy. When the temperature of the power steer-ing system goes down, the power assist level willreturn to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the powersteering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel isoperated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-tion.

If the power steering warning light PS illuminateswhile the engine is running, it may indicate thepower steering system is not functioning properlyand may need servicing. Have the power steeringsystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When the power steering warning light illumi-nates with the engine running, there will be nopower assist for the steering but you will still havecontrol of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-ing effort is required to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns and at lowspeeds.

For additional information see “Power steeringwarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section.

POWER STEERING



The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS) (if so equipped)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM



– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning lightilluminates during the self-test or while driving,have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheelsare close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-plies and releases hydraulic pressure.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes veryquickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise from under the hood orfeel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS isoperating properly. However, the pulsation mayindicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.



FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before staringthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.



6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. If thevehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, theTPMS will activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system will acti-vate only when the vehicle is driven at speedsabove 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, referto “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,and “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT isshifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

LCE0134

In case of emergency 6-3


Getting the spare tire and tools1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting

and spare tire cover sA . Remove the jackand the spare tire as indicated.

2. To remove the jack, turn the jack screwcounterclockwise and lift out.

Removing bolt-on wheel cover (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

Wheel cover attachment to the wheel is made byone of the wheel lug nuts. This wheel lug nutneeds to be removed before the wheelcover can be removed from the wheel.

LCE0135 WCE0055



Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

CE1089



Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0048



4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

6. Install the jack in its storage area and tightenthe jack screw clockwise.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

LCE0136



● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

● If the battery of a vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is dis-charged, the ignition switch cannot bemoved from the LOCK position, evenusing the mechanical key or the valetkey. Connect the jumper cables to an-other vehicle, as in the case of a dis-charged battery, and then the ignitionknob can be moved from the LOCK po-sition. Then, jump start the vehicle.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift leverto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (CVT). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.For Intelligent Key system equipped models,use the mechanical key to start the engine.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

WCE0054



8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

● Three-way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushing. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

● For manual transmission models, nevertry to start the vehicle by towing it.When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toN (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).Open all the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

ACE0511 SCE0199A



CAUTION

● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-mission (CVT) models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) models with thefront wheels on towing dollies, or whentowing manual transmission modelswith the front wheels on the ground:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) or manual trans-mission models with the rear wheels onthe ground (if you do not use towingdollies): Always release the parkingbrake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Front

Do not use the hook to tow the vehicle.

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

WCE0132



CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (low)and R (Reverse) (manual transmissionmodels).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st and R (Re-verse) (manual transmission models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

4. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.



7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the high-mounted stop light is removedfirst.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

s1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

s2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3


● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

CLEANING INTERIOR



● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.WAI0006

Appearance and care 7-5


MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . 8-11Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Intelligent key battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Brake pedal* Check the pedal for smooth op-eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes downfurther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)P (Park) position mechanism On a fairlysteep hill check that the vehicle is held securelywith the selector lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operatessmoothly and check that it has the proper freetravel.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral). For CVT models, move the selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-lated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switchis in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative batterycable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame and sparksaway from the fuel tank and battery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Engine coolant reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir4. Battery5. Air cleaner6. Fuse/Fusible link box7. Radiator cap8. Engine oil dipstick9. Drive belt location10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir*1: For Manual Transmission (M/T) model

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI0536

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level sB , add coolant to the MAX levelsA . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold. Ifthere is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level sA .

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0537

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0538 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL



CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap sA by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

sA Oil filler cap

sB Oil drain plug

sC Oil filter

WDI0521



Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.


3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter sC .

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrenchby turning it counterclockwise. Then removethe oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of the en-gine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

sA Oil filler cap

sB Oil drain plug

sC Oil filter

WDI0521



WARNING

● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT FluidNS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using transmission fluid other thanGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 willdamage the CVT, which is not coveredby the NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

The specified CVT fluid is also described oncaution labels located in the engine compart-ment.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake and clutch sys-tems. The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thebrake warning light comes on, add GenuineNISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line sA . Iffluid must be added frequently, the system shouldbe checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0539

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID



CLUTCH FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). Add GenuineNISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line sA . Iffluid must be added frequently, the system shouldbe checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on (if soequipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

LDI0539 LDI0540

WINDOW WASHER FLUID



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY



2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Crankshaft pulley2. Air conditioner compressor3. Water pump4. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is inpoor condition, have it replaced or adjustedby a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition.

LDI0302

SDI1979

DRIVE BELTS



REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped sAspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs sAand pull the unit upward sB .

SDI1895 LDI0541

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER



WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if soequipped)The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the trim panel near the accelera-tor pedal. Refer to the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide” for change intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle sA . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin sB .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

WDI0337

BRAKES



Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in thefuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B isused in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES



ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetabs sA and lifting the cover up from thefront sB .

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0542 WDI0452



Fusible linksIf any electrical equipment does not operate andthe fuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks in the holders sA , sB and sC . If any of thesefusible links are melted, replace only with genuineNISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links inholders sA and sB , see a NISSAN dealer.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the sunglasses holder sA .

3. Pull up on the sunglasses holder to removesB .

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller sC . Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a knowngood fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

7. Install the sunglasses holder.

LDI0546 WDI0569



KEYFOB

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin sA .

s2 Remove the battery sB .

s3 Install a new battery sC with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.


LDI0484

BATTERY REPLACEMENT



INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERYReplace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver sA into the slit sBof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated sC sD .

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

SDI1867

WDI0535




HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulbThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the plastic base when han-dling the bulb. Never touch the glassenvelope. Touching the glass could sig-nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-light performance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 55Bulb no.: H13*

High beam:Wattage: 60Bulb no.: H13*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

LIGHTS



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly

Low/High (Halogen) 55/60 H13

Park 4 194

Turn 27 3457AK

Side marker 4 194

Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11

Front map lights* 8 168

Room light 8 AL57

Glove box light* (if so equipped) 1.4 158

Trunk light 5 158

High-mounted stop light* 16 921

Rear combination light

Turn signal light 27/7 3057K

Stop/Tail 27/7 3057K

Backup (reversing) 16 921

Rear side marker 4 194

License plate light* 5 216

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Front map lights2. Room light3. Headlight assembly4. Front fog light (if so equipped)5. High-mounted stop light6. License plate light7. Rear combination light

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb replacement

LDI0547

WDI0257



Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/orcover.

Use a cloth s1 to protect the interior light hous-ing.

Use a cloth sA to protect the light housing.Interior light

WDI0206

Map light (if so equipped)LDI0544



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tireand Loading Information label under the9Cold Tire Inflation Pressure9 heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. Do not loadyour vehicle beyond this capac-ity. Overloading your vehicle mayresult in reduced tire life, unsafeoperating conditions due to pre-mature tire failure, or unfavor-able handling characteristics andcould also lead to a serious acci-dent. Loading beyond the speci-fied capacity may also result infailure of other vehiclecomponents.

WHEELS AND TIRES



● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

LDI0545



s6 Spare tire size (if so equipped).

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P205/60R15P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P205/60R15P205/55R16

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Spare Tire:T125/70*16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

LDI0393



TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395



7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

ExampleWDI0396



The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.



Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.



CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259



● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash. Contact your NISSAN dealeras soon as possible for tire replacementand/or system resetting.


● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.



● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.



● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.




MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-26

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal 55.0 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1

Engine oil *6Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 4 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.8 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.6

Cooling systemWith reservoir 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 7.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2 *3

Manual transmission gear oil Refill to the proper level according to the instructions inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*7

ELF XT4447 M+ 75W-80 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*4

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5

Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluidor equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*4: Never mix different types of fluids.*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”*6: For further details, see “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.*7: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

Technical and consumer information 9-3


not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See 9Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to change

WTI0082



the oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the 9NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide9 for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model MR20DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 121.86 (1,997)

Firing order 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T

CVT (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Steel 15 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum and steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)

Tire size P205/60R15P205/55R16

Spare tire T125/70D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: in (mm)

Overall length 179.8(4,567)

Overall width 70.5(1,790)

Overall height 59.5(1,511)

Front tread 59.8 (1,519.8)

Rear tread 60.8 (1,544)

Wheelbase 105.7(2,685)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label”on the center pillar be-tween the driver’s sidefront and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

STI0457 STI0465

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0182 STI0349 WTI0059



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0174 WTI0167



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm thatthe following parts are enclosed in the plasticbag:

● License plate bracket

● License plate bracket screws x 2

● License plate screws x 2

● Screw grommets x 2

1. Hold the license plate bracket s1 and makea shallow hole in the bumper fascia at thelocation marks (small dimples) using a 0.39in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the areabehind the fascia, apply only light pressureto the drill.

2. Insert the grommets s2 into the holes in thebumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver intothe grommet hole to turn the threaded part ofthe grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using thetwo longer screws s3 .

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws tomount the license plate to the license platebracket using the two M6-14 mm bolts.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

LTI0170

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as 9The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo9 on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as9Seating Capacity9 on Tire and LoadingInformation label.

To get 9the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo9, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M



Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 3,704 lb. (1680 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -3,920 lb. (1778 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification9 chart - 1,000 lb. (454kg).

3,920 lb. (1778 kg) GVWR

– 3,704 lb. (1680 kg) GVW

= 216 lb. (98 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

216 lb. (98 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 22 % tongue weight

In this case, more tongue weight capacity isavailable than is needed to pull the maximumweight trailer. Remember to keep trailer tongueweight between 10 – 15 % of the trailer weight. Ifthe tongue load becomes excessive, rearrangecargo to allow for proper tongue load. Alwaysverify that available capacities are under the re-quired ratings.



TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to thevehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximumweight rating, but your vehicle is only capable oftowing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier in thissection.

CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.



Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.



● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).



● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle- Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Down shift the transmission to a lower gearfor engine braking when driving down steepor long hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, transmission fluidshould be changed more frequently. Foradditional information, see the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier inthis manual.

FLAT TOWINGTowing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.



● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variabletransmission vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-sion parts due to lack of transmissionlubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Continuously VariableTransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’sdrive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-turer’s recommendations when using their prod-uct.

Manual Transmission● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towing maycause damage to internal transmission parts.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)



Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.


10. Repeat steps 1 - 9 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control a num-ber of systems to optimize performanceand help service technicians with diagno-sis and repair. Some of the computersmonitor emission control systems, brakingsystems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems, and airbagsystems. Some data about vehicle opera-tion may be stored in the computers for useduring servicing. Other data may be storedif a crash event occurs. For example, ve-hicle speed, brake application, steeringangle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver orpassenger may be recorded. These types ofsystems are sometimes called Event DataRecorders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are notrecorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equipment.The data may be retrieved during routinevehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent ofthe vehicle owner or lessee, in response toa request by law enforcement, or as other-wise required or permitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.




MEMO

10 Index

A

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45Side and curtain (See supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-11Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-10Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-7Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-14

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-14Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-8Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . .5-21Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-32Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-23, 4-27FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-35

AutomaticAutomatic power window switch . . . . .2-30Transmission selector leverlock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23, 4-28Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14BluetoothT hands-free phone system . . . . .4-37Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Brake

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . .5-21Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-24Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-13, 8-17Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-15Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-32CD player (See audio system) . . . . .4-23, 4-27Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-23Child restraints . . . . . . .1-11, 1-12, 1-19, 1-21

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-19, 1-27,1-33Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-23

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

(models without navigation system) . . . . .4-5Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5


ClutchClutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . .4-23, 4-27Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . .5-10

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Control panel buttonsClock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-35Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-7

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . .1-50

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Defroster switchRear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-20Display controls(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Door open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-14Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-24Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-9Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24, 2-26

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-21Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-45Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

10-2


FuelCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-24

Fuel economy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

H

Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT . . . .4-37Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-21Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-18

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . .4-7Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-20Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-20Intelligent Key system. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . .3-16Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-21Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . .3-16Without Intelligent Key system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . .3-6

Keys, Except Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-3

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number(VIN) plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-53

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-11

10-3


Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-24Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-18Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-18Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-10Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-11Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-47Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-34Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-24Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-23

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-10Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-11Luggage(See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . .9-12

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-20Mirror

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s manual/service manualorder information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-15Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Phone, BluetoothT hands-free system . . . .4-37Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19, 1-27, 1-33Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9Precautions on supplementalrestraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

10-4


Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-32FM/AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-35

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-6Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-24Resetting average speed . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Resetting trip time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-19, 1-27, 1-33Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-24

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-12Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-13

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-4, 1-5

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-18Side air bag system (See supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-34SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

SteeringPower steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-35Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24, 2-26Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24, 2-26Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-53Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-53, 2-11Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-45Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-53Precautions on supplementalrestraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

10-5


Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-38Supplemental side and curtain side-impactair bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50Switch

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-30Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-21Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-18Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-18Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-17

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-36Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-23

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-10

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-23Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

TransmissionContinuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-14Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-12

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trip time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .1-4, 1-5Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-23

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-11Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-8Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-9Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-21Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-10Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-11Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-47Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-14Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-53Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

10-6


Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-17Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-30Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-17Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-17Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

10-7


MEMO

RECOMMENDED FUEL:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


1. Window washer fluid 8-12

2. Engine coolant 8-7

3. Engine oil 8-8

4. Passenger supplemental air bag 1-38

5. Driver supplemental air bag 1-38

6. Spare tire 6-2

7. Fuel recommendation 9-3

8. Seat belts 1-9

9. Door locks 3-4

10. Seats 1-2

11. Fuel-filler door release 3-24, Trunk release

12. Meters and gauges 2-3

13. Hood release 3-22

14. Audio system 4-15, Heater and air condi-tioner 4-7

WGS0031

QUICK REFERENCE


2007 SENTRA OWNER'S MANUAL

Automotive

vehicle features

customersprovide nissan

nissan dealership

warningall information

findwarningsome information

xanavi informatics vehicle

addiimportant information

vehiclesthis manual